Owners manual

ManualsBrandsLG Electronics ManualsCell PhoneF2400

Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone

depending on the software of the phone or your service provider.

MMBB0163211 (1.1)

Summary of content (220 pages)

PAGE 1
Some of contents in this manual may differ from your phone depending on the software of the phone or your service provider. MMBB0163211 (1.
PAGE 2
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ -‬ﻋﺮﺑﻲ‬
PAGE 3
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪8 .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ‪34 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ‪9 ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪34 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ‪12 .......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ ‪34 ...........
PAGE 4
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪39 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪45 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ‪39 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪45 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪39 .........................................................................
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ‪52 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪58 ........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪53 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪58 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪53 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪58 .....
PAGE 6
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺁﻟﻲ ‪62 .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ‪69 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ‪63 ....................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‪70 ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻀﻞ ‪63 ...................................................................................
PAGE 7
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﻨﺌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ F2400‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺻﻐﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻢ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻠﺖ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮﺟﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻭﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮء‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺻﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ( ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻋﻲ )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ‪ F2400‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ .
PAGE 9
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ)ﻣﺨﻔﻒ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ(‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﺩﺧﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺋﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺬﺍﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻐﻨﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﺩﺍﺓ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﺹ‪ .
PAGE 10
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺤﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻣﻚ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .
PAGE 11
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫• ﺻﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 12
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺔﻳﺭﺎﻄﺒﻟﺍ ءﺎﻄﻏ‬ ‫ﻡﺍﺰﺤﻟ ﺕﺎﺤﺘﻓ‬ ‫ﻞﻤﺤﻟﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.
PAGE 13
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .10 ,2‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‪/‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ :‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻼﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﺘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 14
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .13‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻻﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .14‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ “‪.”+‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 15
‫‪ F2400‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻣﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ؛ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪،SIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.
PAGE 18
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﻰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ • ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ • ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺪﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 19
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ “ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ” ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ )ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ(‪ .
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ‪) PIN‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PUK2‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻳﺤﻤﻲ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺘﻚ ‪ SIM‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪) PIN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ .SIM‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪PIN‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺳﻴﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺰ ‪.
PAGE 21
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺩﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ”‪ “+‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺛﻢ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )‬ ‫( ﻟﻤﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫( ﻟﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 22
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫( ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ )‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺤﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﺔ ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.
PAGE 23
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ ‪T9‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ T9‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﻣﻮﺱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ )ﺃ‬ ‫ﺏ ﺝ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺃﺣﻴﺎﻧﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﺌﻲ‪.
PAGE 24
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻜﺘﻮﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻜﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ‪.Good‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ[ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﻠﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪.Home‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﺠﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻭﻓﻘﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫؛‪. 1 ! ، :‬‬ ‫ﺏﺕﺓﺙ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺃﺇﺁﻯﺅﺉء‪3‬‬ ‫ﺱﺵﺹﺽ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺩﺫﺭﺯ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺝﺡﺥ‪6‬‬ ‫ﻥﻩﻭﻯ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻑﻕﻙﻝﻡ‪8‬‬ ‫ﻁﻅﻉﻍ‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ‪0 ،‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) 123‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )ﺭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.
PAGE 26
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻃﻠﺒﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺤﺚ‪ .
PAGE 27
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻈﻞ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪) DTMF‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ DTMF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ .
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ‪/‬ﺇﺷﺮﺍﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺗﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺆﺗﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 29
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 34‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 39‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 30
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 46‬‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 58‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ 8‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 31
‫ﺳﺮﺩ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪( 64‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺮﻏﺒﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫( ﻭ)‬ ‫)‬ ‫( ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺼﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻭﻫﻲ‪“ :‬ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ” ﻭ”ﻋﺎﻡ”‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ” ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ”‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫“ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ” ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-×-1‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ “ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ”‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻄﻪ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 34
‫ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-×-1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ “ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ” ﻭ”ﺻﺎﻣﺖ”‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ” ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻛﺘﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ” ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ )‪ (CLI‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﻢ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺟﺪ( ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ .
PAGE 36
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ “ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳُﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ”‬ ‫ﻭ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ”‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫‪.GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-6-2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺳﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪.
PAGE 38
‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﻣﺮﺡ ﻭﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻋﺸﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-3‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺿﺒﻂ[‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺑﺤﺚ” ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺩ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻭﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻼﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫‪ .b‬ﺏ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪ .c‬ﺝ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .d‬ﺩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-1-4‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪ .e‬ﻫـ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪. ,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-1-4‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻋﻀﻮﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺣﺴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ :‬ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺄﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺑﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪8-1-4‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.(SIM‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺃﺳﻤﺎء[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺪﺧﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 44
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-2-4‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫“ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ” ﻭ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ” ﻭ”ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ”‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-2-4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻔﺢ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ ,‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ .
PAGE 45
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ )‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ‪) Messages‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ(‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-5‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫)‪.(SMS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ‪SMS‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻝ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ”‬ ‫“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺼﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .
PAGE 46
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ‪ :T9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ .T9‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ T9‬ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ “‪) ”T9 off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪ .(T9‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪T9‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻜﺘﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ]‪) [Attach‬ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻔﻆ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻘﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬ ‫ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 48
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ‪ SIM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.SIM‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪ SIM‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺮﺩ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺮﻭءﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‪ .
PAGE 49
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺇﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻠﻤﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ :‬ﺍﻻﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺪﻟﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .
PAGE 51
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-7-5‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ :‬ﻳﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ :SMS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ‪ SMS‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-8-5‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺣﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻌﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺘﻚ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻣﻪ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﻻ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻚ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ[‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﻠﻤﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ(‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ‪ٍ 5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮﺓ ﻫﻲ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ‪ٍ 3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-6‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ]‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]‬ ‫[‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 55
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻚ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪ :‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫• ﻛﺸﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 9‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪.MMS‬‬ ‫◄ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻮﺭﻕ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺒﻚ ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺷﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ ‪ /‬ﺳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺳﻨﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﻬﺮ ‪ /‬ﻳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺒﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ[‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﻛﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻔﻀﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪ 5‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-4-7‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪6-4-7‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﻳﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ :‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻻﺕ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺩﻭﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﻞ‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ‪ :‬ﻟﺤﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪ :‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-6-7‬‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻳﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺪﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺗﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺸﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3-6-7‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻟﻠﺸﺒﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.
PAGE 63
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺑﺮﻭﺗﻮﻛﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻘﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺣﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻄﻴﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺸﻐﻞ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .
PAGE 64
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪ URL‬ﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻢ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﺣﺪﺩ “ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ” ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻭﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫“ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‪ :‬ﺳﺘﺨﺪ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎ “‬ ‫” ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎ “‬ ‫” ﻹ ﺧﺎ ﻟﺮﻣﻮ ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪(WAP‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻄﻠﺒﻬﺎ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ (WAP‬ﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻔﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪(ISDN‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ 9600 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪14000‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻃﺆ‪ :‬ﺇﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺒﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ WAP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫◄ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪4-1-8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪URL‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ “ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ”‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪5-1-8‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻃﻠﻌﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SIM‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻛﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ SIM‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﻳﺘﻤﺎﺷﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-9‬‬ ‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪1-1-9‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺟﺮﻯ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ[ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ[‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪J2ME (Java 2‬‬ ‫‪ (Micro Edition‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(J2ME(Java 2 Micro Edition‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2-1-9‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪.WAP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 70
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻬﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺎﺟﺘﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻗﺮﺹ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺷﺒﻚ ﺟﻮﺍﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ • ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ “ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ”‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺫﻥ ﻭﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪F2400 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪GSM 900 / DCS 1800 :‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ‪C°55+ :‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ‪C°10- :‬‬ ‫‪72‬‬
PAGE 72
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ‪ -‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
PAGE 73
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪8 ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪35 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ‪9 .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪35 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪13 .................................................................. F2400‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯽ ‪35 ........
PAGE 74
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪40 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪46 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ‪40 ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ‪47 ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪41 .............................................................................
PAGE 75
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪55 .........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪60 .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪56 ....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪60 .....................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪56 ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ ‪60 .........
PAGE 76
‫‪ F2400‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ‪65 ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ‪72 ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ‪65 ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪72 .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ‪65 ..................................................................
PAGE 77
‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺍﻝ‪.‬ﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ F2400‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺫﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺮژی ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ )‪(SAR‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ F١٢٠٠‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻣﻮﺍﺝ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 79
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫• ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻔﺎﻑ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻛﺶ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻨﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﻳﺎ ﺑﻠﻴﻂ ﻫﺎی ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎء ﺗﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭی ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺧﻔﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻘﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱﻫﺎی ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﯽ ﺳﻮﺧﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 81
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻣﻨﻔﯽ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.
PAGE 82
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫• ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻓﻴﺶ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺻﺪﻓﻰ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﻃﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻯ ﮔﻮﺷﻰ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻟﻨﺰﻫﺎﻯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 83
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻰ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﭘﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻧﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 84
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪ .١٠ ,٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪ /‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎﻯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻰ ﻭ ﺑﻰ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ .۵‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﻰ ﻧﻮﻳﺴﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 85
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‪ :‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١٢‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ :‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٣‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻰ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 86
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻯ ‪F2400‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺳﺎﻛﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺪﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻛﻠﯽ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﻰ ﺑﻪ ‪WAP‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 87
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺁﺯﺍﺩﺳﺎﺯﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭﭘﻮﺵ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻰ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺭﺍ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 88
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻯ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﻼﻳﻰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﻭﻯ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﺍﻣﻰ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﻠﺰﻯ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻰ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺷﻴﺪﮔﻰ‬ ‫ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 89
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﺩﺍﺑﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ • ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺭژﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻯ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 90
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﺍﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ “ﭘﺮ”‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺁﺩﺍﭘﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺮﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 91
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺪﻫﺎی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ)ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ PUK‬ﻭ ‪ (PUK٢‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‪ ۵-۵-٧-‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۶۴‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺪ ‪ ۴) PIN‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٨‬ﺭﻗﻤﯽ(‬ ‫)‪ PIN(Personal Identification Number‬ﻳﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻮﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ ٬‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺪ‬ ‫‪ PIN‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .
PAGE 92
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ +‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺪﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻬﺎی‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‪٬‬‬ ‫( ﻛﻞ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ )‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ )ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ( ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 93
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪی ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪( ) .‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ ٬‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻛﻨﺎﺭی‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻠﻨﺪی ﺻﺪﺍی ﺗﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺰﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .
PAGE 94
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ LCD‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪T٩‬‬ ‫ﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‪ ٬‬ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ T٩ .
PAGE 95
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﻜﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻥ‪ ٬‬ﻟﻐﺖ ﻏﻠﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ٬‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻐﺖ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ‪ Good‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ‪Home‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 96
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻬﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﻔﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ )ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ‪١٢٣‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ١٢٣‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬ ‫‪1:@‘!?-,.
PAGE 97
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻬﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ )ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﮕﻮﻳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ٬‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺻﺤﺒﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ٬‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﻄﻠﻊ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻮﻕ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ]ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ[ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ‪ DTMF‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‪ ٬‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ DTMF‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎی ‪ DTMF‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.
PAGE 99
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺭﻭی ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩی ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﯽ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﻨﻨﺪ ﺍﺯﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﻬﺘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻔﺮﺍﻧﺲ‪/‬ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 35‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺮﺯﺷﯽ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth ١‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻛﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﻫﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 37‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪١‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺟﻬﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 42‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫‪
PAGE 101
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 48‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 60‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۵‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫‪ ٧‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫‪ ۶‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 57‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ٨‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 66‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﻋﻜﺲ
PAGE 102
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 71‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬ ‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪33‬‬
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫(ﻭ)‬ ‫)‬ ‫( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻰ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎﻯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻋﻰ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻯ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 104
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻫﻨﮕﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ :‬ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ,‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ,‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪ ,‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻠﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪x-١-١-‬‬ ‫◄ ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 105
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ‪x-١-٢-‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺮﺯﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 106
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ )‪ (CLI‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ( ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺎی ﻧﺎﻣﻮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 107
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺑﯽ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵-٢‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻨﺠﻬﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫◄ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪ :‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺞ‪.
PAGE 108
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪GPRS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪) GPRS‬ﺟﯽ ﭘﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﺭ ﺁﺱ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶-٢‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪ ًﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۶-٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٣‬‬ ‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭی ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﯽ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻮﺷﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪Bluetooth‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 110
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٣‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻭﺍﺣﺪ[ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺍﺣﺪی ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .۴‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۴‬‬ ‫]ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺒﻴﻦ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬ ‫◄ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ(‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ :Bluetooth‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-۴‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎ ]ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ[‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 112
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.a‬‬ ‫]ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.b‬‬ ‫]ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.c‬‬ ‫‪ .d‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .e‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻋﻀﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﻋﻀﺎی ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-١-۴‬‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫◄ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﺎﻡ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﭙﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎک ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-١-۴‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻫﺎی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﺳﺎﻣﯽ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺎک ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 115
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺃﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی )ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﮏ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﮑﻮﺋﺮ ﮐﺮﺳﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺁﻧﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .
PAGE 116
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-٢-۴‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎک ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۴‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ[ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 117
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵‬‬ ‫( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎﻯ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮ )‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۵‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎﻯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ‬ ‫)‪ (SMS‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﻰ ﻭ ‪ SMS‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻰ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﮐﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻯ ”‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪ :T٩‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍی ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺘﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪ :T٩‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 119
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎی ‪ :T٩‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ T٩‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ T٩‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.
PAGE 120
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ “ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ”‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﻰ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫◄ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﻰ ﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﻰ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﻫﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.
PAGE 121
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫• ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﻰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻰ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‪:‬ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺣﺬﻑ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .
PAGE 122
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻰ‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻮﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﻴﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ(‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 123
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-۵‬‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻟﺘﯽ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٧-۵‬‬ ‫• ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬‫‪ MMS‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﮕﻮی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 124
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ‬ ‫◄ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٧-۵‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨-۵‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٨-۵‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﮐﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻠﯽ‪ ،X.۴٠٠ ،‬ﭘﺴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﮑﯽ‪ERMES ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺘﻀﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 125
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻠﻴﻐﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺎﻣﻬﺎی ﺑﺎﺯﺭﮔﺎﻧﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٨-۵‬‬ ‫◄ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺧﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺘﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺮﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 126
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺑﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻜﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺮﺍی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎﺯ‬ ‫[‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬ ‫◄ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﺋﯽ ]‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ۵ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.+٢ ،+١ ،٠ ،-١ ،-٢‬‬ ‫[‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫◄ ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ ٣ ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻭ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ(‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﯽ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 127
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﺗﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﻭی ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫• ﻋﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﻜﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻗﻮﻩ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺭ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.
PAGE 128
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﮑﺴﻬﺎی ﺑﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۴-۶‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫◄ ﺟﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﯽ‪ :‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ‪ ، MMS‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 129
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺣﺘﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.١‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫] ﻣﻨﻮ[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺯ‪/‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ /‬ﻣﺎﻩ‪ /‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻧﮓ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-٢-٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٧‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-٢-٧‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ )ﺯﻣﺎﻥ( ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 130
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﻴﻤﻴﺸﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-٧‬‬ ‫◄ ﻃﺮﺡ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ ۴‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺳﺒﻚ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻏﺬی ﻭ ﻣﺘﺎﻟﻴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫◄ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺵ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 131
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﺏ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻼﺗﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺴﺎﺯﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﮑﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.
PAGE 132
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫) ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۴-۴-٧‬‬ ‫◄ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻟﻐﻮ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ )ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﻕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۵-۴-٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 133
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٣-۵-٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺗﻠﻔﻨﯽ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻣﺰ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻤﺎﺳﻬﺎی ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺎﺩﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺕ(‬ ‫◄ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺎﺩﺭﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 134
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪۶-٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-۶-٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩﺑﺨﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻦ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺪ ﺍﻣﻨﻴﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.
PAGE 135
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﻬﺎی ‪) WAP‬ﭘﺮﻭﺗﮑﻞ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺴﻴﻢ( ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻧﮑﺪﺍﺭی‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﺷﻨﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭﺍﺯﻫﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺑﺎﻳﻞ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ WAP‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ، WAP‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻓﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﭘﺮﺍﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .
PAGE 136
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٨‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺎﺑﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٢-١-٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ URL‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺏ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻳﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪ .
PAGE 137
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ ١‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪GPRS ٢‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‪ /‬ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ :IP‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )‪ ( IP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻴﺮی‪ :‬ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ :‬ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﻞ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺧﻞ ‪ WAP‬ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮگ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 138
‫ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﺘﺮﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﻮﺭﺕ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﺴﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪DNS‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ DNS‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ﻓﺮﻋﯽ‪ :‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ‪ IP‬ﺳﺮﻭﺭ ‪ DNS‬ﻓﺮﻋﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ‬‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﻫﺎی ‪ WAP‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.
PAGE 139
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺍﺭک ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٧-١-٨‬‬ ‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺍﻫﯽ ﻫﺎ ی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ‪ :‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫◄ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ‪ :‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﺠﻮﺯﻫﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٨-١-٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﮔﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮔﺮ )ﻭﺏ( ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.
PAGE 140
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪٩‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯی ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺯﻳﻬﺎی ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-٩‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮ ‪١-١-٩‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ‬ ‫ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻴﺪﻟﺖ‬ ‫]ﻣﻨﻮ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎی‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺨﺐ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.
PAGE 141
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺘﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ • ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ JAR‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪JAD‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﯽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺰ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JAD‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )‪ (J٢ME‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻴﻜﻪ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺗﻠﻔﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺟﺎﻭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.
PAGE 142
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮ ﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻃﺮی ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ • ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ‪ LG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺎﺭﺍﻧﺘﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺯ ﻓﺮی‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.
PAGE 143
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‪F2400 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‪DCS 1800 / GSM 900 :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪+55°C :‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ ‪-10°C :‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬
PAGE 144
F2400 User Guide - ENGLISH
PAGE 145
Table of Contents Introduction ………………………………………………… 8 Menu Tree ………………………………………………… 32 Guidelines for safe and efficient use ……………………… 9 Selecting functions and options ………………………… 35 F2400 features …………………………………………… 13 Profiles …………………………………………………… 36 Parts of the phone ………………………………………… 13 Activate …………………………………………………… 36 Display information ……………………………………… 16 Personalise ……………………………………………… 36 Rename …………………………………………………… 37 Getting started …………………………………………… 18 Installing the SIM card and the handse
PAGE 146
F2400 User Guide Tools ……………………………………………………… 41 Copy all …………………………………………………… 45 Bluetooth ………………………………………………… 41 Delete all ………………………………………………… 46 My devices………………………………………………… 41 Information………………………………………………… 46 Handsfree devices ………………………………………… 41 Scheduler ………………………………………………… 47 Settings …………………………………………………… 41 Add new …………………………………………………… 47 Calculator ………………………………………………… 41 View ……………………………………………………… 47 Unit converter …………………………………………… 42 View all …………………………………………………… 48 World time ………
PAGE 147
Table of Contents Info message ……………………………………………… 54 General pictures…………………………………………… 61 Read ……………………………………………………… 55 Mode pictures …………………………………………… 61 Topics ……………………………………………………… 55 Phonebook pictures ……………………………………… 61 Templates ………………………………………………… 55 Settings …………………………………………………… 62 Text templates …………………………………………… 55 Memory status …………………………………………… 62 Multimedia templates……………………………………… 56 Clear album …………………………………………………62 Signature ………………………………………………… 56 Auto save ………………………………………………… 6
PAGE 148
F2400 User Guide Answer mode ……………………………………………… 65 Home ……………………………………………………… 70 Send my number ………………………………………… 65 Bookmarks ………………………………………………… 71 Call waiting………………………………………………… 66 Profiles …………………………………………………… 71 Minute minder …………………………………………… 66 Go to URL ………………………………………………… 73 Auto redial ………………………………………………… 66 Cache settings …………………………………………… 73 Security settings ………………………………………… 66 Cookies settings …………………………………………… 73 PIN code request ………………………………………… 66 Security certification …………………
PAGE 149
Introduction Congratulations on your purchase of the advanced and compact F2400 mobile phone, designed to operate with the latest digital mobile communication technology. This user’s guide contains important information on the use and operation of this phone. Please read all the information carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage to or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this user’s guide could void your warranty for this equipment.
PAGE 150
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this manual. Exposure to radio frequency energy Radio wave exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) information This mobile phone model F2400 has been designed to comply with applicable safety requirement for exposure to radio waves.
PAGE 151
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • The coating of the phone may be damaged if covered with wrap or vinyl wrapper. • Use dry cloth to clean the exterior of the unit. (Do not use solvent such as benzene, thinner or alcohol.) • Do not subject this unit to excessive smoke or dust. • Do not keep the phone next to credit cards or transport tickets; it can affect the information on the magnetic strips. • Do not tap the screen with a sharp object; otherwise, it may damage the phone.
PAGE 152
Guidelines for safe and efficient use • RF energy may affect some electronic systems in your motor vehicle such as car stereo, safety equipment. • When your vehicle is equipped with an air bag, do not obstruct with installed or portable wireless equipment. It can cause serious injury due to improper performance. Blasting area Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. Observe restrictions, and follow any regulations or rules.
PAGE 153
Guidelines for safe and efficient use Battery information and care • You do not need to completely discharge the battery before recharging. Unlike other battery systems, there is no memory effect that could compromise the battery’s performance. • Use only LG batteries and chargers. LG chargers are designed to maximize the battery life. • Do not disassemble or short-circuit the battery pack. • Keep the metal contacts of the battery pack clean.
PAGE 154
F2400 features 1. Headset jack Parts of the phone • Connect a headset here. Front view 2. Up/down side keys • Press this key to display the current time on the front screen. 3. Front screen 1. Headset jack 2. Up/down side keys 4. Camera lens • Controls the volume of keypad tone in standby mode with the clamshell open. • Controls the earpiece volume during a phone call. 3. Front screen 4. Camera lens 5. Flash n Note Dirt on the camera lens could affect the image quality. 5.
PAGE 155
F2400 features Right side view Rear view Battery latch Press this button to remove the battery cover. Camera key Press and hold down this key to activate the camera mode. Also use this key to take a shot.
PAGE 156
F2400 features 1. Earpiece Open view 2, 10. Left soft key/ Right soft key: Performs the function indicated by the text on the screen immediately above it. 1. Earpiece 3. Scheduler key: A shortcut key to the Scheduler menu. 7. Main screen Menu Contacts 4. Send key: Dials a phone number and answers incoming calls. You can also quickly access the latest incoming, outgoing and missed calls by pressing the key in standby mode. 8. Navigation keys 2. Left soft key 9. Confirm key 10. Right soft key 3.
PAGE 157
F2400 features 11. Downloads key: A shortcut key to the Downloads menu. 12. End/Power key: Used to end a call or reject a call and also to go back to standby mode. Hold this key down to turn the phone on/off. 13. Clear key: Deletes a character by each press. Hold the key down to clear all input. Also use this key to go back to the previous screen. 14. Special function keys: • : A long press of this key enters the international call character “+”.
PAGE 158
F2400 features Icon Description Indicates that the vibration ringer has been set. Indicates the receipt of an e-mail message. Indicates the Loud profile is activated. Indicates the Silent profile is activated. Indicates the Headset profile is activated. Indicates the General profile is activated. Indicates that you can use the push message service. Indicates that the phone is accessing the WAP. Indicates that you are using GPRS. Indicates that you entered the security page.
PAGE 159
Getting started Installing the SIM card and the handset battery Make sure the power is off before you remove the battery. 1. Remove the battery cover. Press the battery release latch and slide the battery cover toward the bottom of the phone. And remove the battery cover. n Note Removing the battery from the phone when the power is on may cause the phone to malfunction. 18 2. Remove the battery. Hold the top edge of the battery and lift the battery from the battery compartment.
PAGE 160
Getting started 3. Install the SIM card 4. Install the battery. Insert the SIM card into the holder. Slide the SIM card into the SIM card holder. Make sure that the SIM card is inserted properly and that the gold contact area on the card is facing downwards. To remove the SIM card, press down lightly and pull it in the reverse direction. Insert the bottom of the battery first into the bottom edge of the battery compartment. Push down the top of the battery until it snaps into space. 5.
PAGE 161
Getting started Charging the battery To connect the mains adapter to the phone, you must have installed the battery. n Caution • Do not force the connector as this may damage the phone and/or the travel adapter. • Insert the battery pack charger vertically to wall power outlet. • If you use the battery pack charger out of your own country, use an attachment plug adapter for the proper configuration. • Do not remove your battery or the SIM card while charging.
PAGE 162
Getting started Disconnecting the adapter Turning your phone on and off 1. When charging is finished, the moving bars of the battery icon stop and ‘Full’ is displayed on the screen. Turning your phone ON 2. Unplug the adapter from the power outlet. Disconnect the adapter from the phone by pressing the grey tabs on both sides of the connector and pull the connector out. 1.
PAGE 163
Getting started Access codes PUK code (4 to 8 digits) You can use the access codes described in this section to avoid unauthorised use of your phone. The access codes (except PUK and PUK2 codes) can be changed by using the Change codes feature [Menu 7-5-5]. See page 68. The PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) code is required to change a blocked PIN code. The PUK code may be supplied with the SIM card. If not, contact your network operator for the code. If you lose the code, also contact your network operator.
PAGE 164
Getting started Barring password The barring password is required when you use Call barring [Menu 7-5-3] function. You obtain the password from your network operator when you subscribe to this function. See page 67 for further details.
PAGE 165
General functions Making and answering calls Making an international call Making a call 1. Press and hold the key for the international prefix. The ‘+’ character automatically selects the international access code. 1. Make sure your phone is switched on. 2. Enter a phone number, including the area code. ] Press and hold the clear key ( the entire number. 3. Press the send key ( ) to erase 3. Press ) to call the number. 4. To end the call, press the end key ( right soft key.
PAGE 166
General functions Adjusting the volume ] You can answer a call while using the address book or other menu features. If you want to adjust the earpiece volume during a call, use the side keys ( ) . Press the up side key to increase and down side key to decrease the volume. 2. To end the call, close the phone or press the key. n Note In standby mode with the sliding keypad down, pressing the side keys adjusts the key tone volume.
PAGE 167
General functions T9 mode This mode lets you enter words with only one keystroke per letter. Each key on the keypad has more than one letter. The T9 mode automatically compares your keystrokes with an internal dictionary to determine the correct word, thus requiring far fewer keystrokes than the traditional ABC mode. This is sometimes known as predictive text.
PAGE 168
General functions 1. When you are in the T9 predictive text input mode, start entering a word by pressing keys to . Press one key per letter. - The word changes as letters are typed. Ignore what’s on the screen until the word is typed completely. - If the word is still incorrect after typing completely, press the down navigation key one or more to cycle through the other word options. Example: n Note You can't use this function in the Phonebook list mode. 2.
PAGE 169
General functions n Note Refer to the table below for more information on the characters available using the alphanumeric keys. Characters in the order display Key Lower Case Upper Case The 123 mode enables you to enter numbers in a text message (a telephone number, for example). Press the keys corresponding to the required digits before manually switching back to the appropriate text entry mode. . , / ? ! - : ' '' 1 .
PAGE 170
General functions In-call menu Answering an incoming call Your phone provides a number of control functions that you can use during a call. To access these functions during a call, press the left soft key [Options]. To answer an incoming call when the handset is ringing, simply press the key. The handset is also able to warn you of an incoming call while you are already on a call. A tone sounds in the earpiece, and the display will show that a second call is waiting.
PAGE 171
General functions Muting the microphone You can mute the microphone during a call by pressing the [Options] key then selecting Mute on. The handset can be unmuted by selecting Mute off. When the handset is muted, the caller cannot hear you, but you can still hear them. person who set up the multiparty call. These options are all available from the In-Call menu. The maximum callers in a multiparty call are five.
PAGE 172
General functions Activate the conference call on hold Ending a conference call Press the left soft key, then select the Conference/Join All. The currently displayed caller from a conference call can be disconnected by pressing the key. To end a conference call, press the left soft key, then select the Multiparty/End Multiparty. After pressing the left soft key, selecting End all Calls will end all the active and on-hold calls.
PAGE 173
Menu Tree 1. Profiles (see page 36) 3. Tools (see page 41) 1 Vibrate only 1 Bluetooth 2 Silent 2 Calculator 3 General 3 Unit converter 4 Loud 4 World time 5 Headset 5 Voice recorder 6 Memory status 2. Call register (see page 38) 1 Missed calls 1 Contacts 3 Dialled calls 2 Scheduler 4 Delete recent calls 3 Memo 5 Call charges 4 Calender setting 6 GPRS information 32 4.
PAGE 174
Menu Tree 5. Messages (see page 49) 7. Settings (see page 63) 1 Write message 1 Alarm clock 2 Inbox 2 Date & Time 3 Outbox 3 Phone settings 4 Drafts 4 Call settings 5 Listen to voice mail 5 Security settings 6 Info message 6 Network settings 7 Templates 7 Reset settings 8 Settings 8 GPRS setings 6.
PAGE 175
Menu Tree 8. Service (see page 70) 9.
PAGE 176
Selecting functions and options Your phone offers a set of functions that allow you to customise the phone. These functions are arranged in menus and sub-menus, accessed via the two soft keys marked [ ] and [ ]. Each menu and sub-menu lets you view and alter the settings of a particular function. Menu Contacts The roles of the soft keys vary according to the current context; the label on the bottom line of the screen just above each key indicates its current role.
PAGE 177
Profiles Menu 1 In Profiles, you can adjust and customise the phone tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. There are five preset profiles: Vibrate only, Silent, General, Loud and Headset. Each profile can be personalised. Press the left soft key [Menu] and select Profiles using up/down navigation keys. Activate Menu 1-x-1 1. A list of profiles is displayed. 2. In the Profiles list, scroll to the profile you want to activate and press the left soft key [Select] or OK key. 3.
PAGE 178
Profiles Rename Menu 1-x-3 You can rename a profile and give it any name you want. n Note Vibrate only, Silent and Headset profiles cannot be renamed. 1. To change the name of a profile, scroll to the profile in the profile list and after pressing the left soft key or the OK key, select Rename. 2. Key in the desired name and press the OK key or the left soft key [OK].
PAGE 179
Call register Menu 2 You can check the record of missed, received, and dialled calls only if the network supports the Calling Line Identification (CLI) within the service area. Received calls Menu 2-2 This option lets you view the last 10 incoming calls. You can also: The number and name (if available) are displayed together with the date and time at which the call was made. You can also view call times.
PAGE 180
Call register Delete recent calls Menu 2-4 Call costs Menu 2-5-2 Allows you to delete Missed calls and Received calls lists. You can delete Dialled calls and All calls lists at one time. Allows you to check the cost of your last call, all calls, remaining and reset the cost. To reset the cost, you need to PIN2 code. Call charges Settings Call duration Menu 2-5 Menu 2-5-1 Allows you to view the duration of your incoming and outgoing calls. You can also reset the call times.
PAGE 181
Call register GPRS information Menu 2-6 You can check the amount of data transferred over the network through the GPRS information option. In addition, you can also view how much time you are online. Call duration Menu 2-6-1 You can check the duration of Last call and All calls. You can also reset the call timers. Data volumes Menu 2-6-2 You can check The Sent, Received or All data volumes and Reset all.
PAGE 182
Tools Menu 3 Bluetooth Menu 3-1 Bluetooth enables compatible mobile devices, peripherals and computers that are in close proximity to communicate directly with each other without wires. This handset supports built-in Bluetooth connectivity, which makes it possible to connect them with compatible Bluetooth headsets, computer applications and so on. My devices Menu 3-1-1 You can view all devices which are compatible with Bluetooth phone.
PAGE 183
Tools Unit converter Menu 3-3 This converts any measurement into a unit you want. There are 4 types that can be converted into units: Length, Area, Weight, and Volume. Voice recorder Menu 3-5 The voice memo feature you to record up to 10 voice messages and each memo is up to 20 Seconds. Record Menu 3-5-1 1. You can select one of four unit types by pressing [Unit] key. You can record voice memo in Voice recorder menu. 2. Select the standard value by using 1.
PAGE 184
Organiser Menu 4 Contacts n Note In standby mode, press right soft key to access directly. Menu 4-1 [Contacts] Search (Calling from phonebook) Menu 4-1-1 ] Write text/multimedia message: After you have found the number you want, you can send a text/ multimedia message to the selected number. ] Send via Bluetooth: You can send the data of phone book to devices which is compatible with bluetooth through bluetooth. 1. Select Search by press the left soft key [Select] or [OK].
PAGE 185
Organiser 1. Select Add new by press left soft key or [OK]. [Select] 2. Select the memory you want to save: SIM or Phone. If you set to Phone, you need to select which number you want as Main number. a. Press [OK] to input a name. b. Press [OK], then you can input a number. c. Press [OK]. d. You can set a group for the entry by pressing , : e. You can set a character and a picture for the entry by pressing , , , .
PAGE 186
Organiser Settings 1. Press the right soft mode. Menu 4-1-5 [Contacts] in standby ] View options Scroll to highlight View options, and then press the left soft key [Select]. 2. Scroll to Settings, then press the left soft key [Select]. - Name only: Set the phonebook list with displaying only name. ] Set memory - With pictures: Set the phonebook list with the information of character and picture. Scroll to highlight Set memory, and then press the left soft key [Select].
PAGE 187
Organiser • Phone to SIM: You can copy the entry from Phone memory to SIM Card. 3. You can see the following submenus. • Keep original: When copying, Original Dial Number is kept. • Delete original: When copying, Original Dial Number will be erased. Delete all Menu 4-1-7 You can delete all entries in SIM and Phone. This function requires Security code. 1. Press the right soft key [Contacts] in standby mode and select Delete all, press [Select]. 2. Then select a memory to erase. 3.
PAGE 188
Organiser 1. Open the phonebook first by pressing the right soft key [Contacts] in standby mode. Select Information by pressing the left soft key [Select]. 2. Scroll to Memory status, then press the left soft key [OK]. ] Own number (SIM dependent) You can save and check your own number in SIM card. Scheduler Menu 4-2 When you enter this menu a Calendar will show up. On top of the screen there are sections for date. Whenever you change the date, the calendar will be updated according to the date.
PAGE 189
Organiser View all Menu 4-2-3 Shows the notes that are set for all days. Use , to browse through the note lists. If you want to view the note in detail, press left soft key [Select]. Delete past Menu 4-2-4 You can delete the past schedule that has been already notified you. Delete all You can delete for the all notes. Memo Menu 4-3 1. Select the Memo by pressing the left soft key [Select]. 2. If being empty, Add new by pressing the left soft key [Add]. 3.
PAGE 190
Messages Menu 5 Press the Menu key ( using navigation keys. Write message Write text message ) and select Messages Menu 5-1 Menu 5-1-1 Your phone receives voice mail notification messages and Short Message Service(SMS) messages. Voice mail and SMS are network services. Please contact your network operator for more information. When the icon appears, you have received voice mail. When the icon appears, you have received a new text message.
PAGE 191
Messages ] Add T9 dictionary: You can add your own word. This menu can be shown only when the edit mode is Predictive. ] T9 languages: Select the language for T9 input mode. You can also deactivate T9 input mode by selecting ‘T9 off ’. ] Exit: If you select this while writing the message, you can exit from writing message and go back to the previous screen. The message you have written is not stored. 3.
PAGE 192
Messages 3. You can add a slide by moving the cursor on , then pressing the OK key or the left soft key [Select]. You can also add a slide using the right soft key [Menu]. 4. Press the left soft key [Options]. The following options are available. ] Send: Supports multiple numbers and email addresses. ] Preview: Displays the multimedia message you wish to send. ] Save: Saves the multimedia message in draft or as a template. ] Add slide: Adds a slide before or after the current slide.
PAGE 193
Messages Inbox Menu 5-2 Received text messages and page messages can be searched and the contents can be viewed. Received messages are displayed in date order. Icon Icon directive Read SIM message Unread SIM message Read message Unread message Each received message has the following options available. Press the left soft key [Options]. ] Reply: Replies to the received message. You will be alerted when you have received messages. They will be saved in the Inbox. You can identify each message by icons.
PAGE 194
Messages Icon Icon directive Outbox Read multimedia messages Unread multimedia messages You can view the list and contents of sent messages in this menu and can also verify if the transmission was successful. Read notified multimedia messages The following options are available. Unread notified multimedia messages Icon Menu 5-3 Icon directive • Reply: Replies to the sender. Sent SIM message • Forward: Forwards the selected message to other recipients.
PAGE 195
Messages • Delete: Deletes the current message. Listen to voice mail • Forward: Forwards the current message to other recipients. This menu provides you with a quick way of accessing your voice mailbox (if provided by your network). Before using this feature, you must enter the voice server number obtained from your network operator. • View: Displays information about the outbox messages: Subject (only for Multimedia message), Message date & time, Message type, Message size.
PAGE 196
Messages Read Menu 5-6-1 When you have received broadcast messages and select Read to view the message, it will be displayed on the screen. Topics Menu 5-6-2 To create new topics, press the left soft key [Option] then select Add new. If you already have topics, you can deactivate, edit, or delete them by using the left soft key [Options]. Templates Menu 5-7 There are pre-defined messages in the list. You can view and edit the template messages or create new messages.
PAGE 197
Messages Multimedia templates Menu 5-7-2 ] Preview: Displays the draft multimedia message. ] Save: Saves multimedia messages in draft form or as templates. ] Add Slide: Adds a slide before or after the current slide. ] Move to slide: Moves to next or previous slide. ] Delete slide: Deletes the highlighted slide. ] Set slide format: Sets the timer for slide, text, or to align the message contents right, left, top and bottom. ] Add T9 dictionary: You can add our own word.
PAGE 198
Messages ] Reply via same service centre: When a message is sent, it allows the recipients to reply and charge the cost of the reply to your telephone bill. ] Network settings: If you select multimedia message server, you can set URL for multimedia message server. ] SMS centre: If you want to send the text message, you can receive the address of SMS centre through this menu. ] Permitted types Personal: Personal message. Advertisements: Commercial message.
PAGE 199
Messages Info message Menu 5-8-4 ] Receive Yes: If you select this menu, your phone will receive Info service messages. No: If you select this menu, your phone will not receive Info service messages any more. ] Alert Yes: Your phone will beep when you have received Info service message numbers. No: Your phone will not beep even though you have received info service messages. ] Languages You can select the language you want by pressing [On/Off].
PAGE 200
Camera Menu 6 With the camera you can take pictures of people and events while on the move. Take picture Menu 6-1 • To take a picture with Folder opened 1. Select Take picture, and then press . If you want to reach this menu directly, press for a long time. ] Brightness [ ]: Use the right/left navigation keys to adjust lighting. 5 lighting levels are available: -2, -1, 0, +1, +2. ] Autoshoot [ ]: Allows you to select the delay time (off, 3 Seconds and 5 Seconds).
PAGE 201
Camera • To take a picture with Folder closed Take in modes You can see yourself by sub LCD, when you take your self-portrait. You can take a picture on the various of backgrounds. Furthermore, you can select a frame by pressing the navigation key ( or ). 1. Press [ ] for a long time. 2. Select Take picture highlight with side volume key [ ], then press [ ]. 3. Focus on the subject to capture the image, and then press [ ]. This time, the picture is saved automatically.
PAGE 202
Camera General pictures Menu 6-4-2 You can view all pictures except of frame and phone book ones. Mode pictures Menu 6-4-3 You can view all frame pictures. • Options ] Multi view: You can view the maximum of 9 thumbnails in a screen. ] Write multimedia messages: You can send a picture thru MMS. ] Protection: You can lock the picture for deleting in mistakes in this menu. Phonebook pictures Menu 6-4-4 You can view all phonebook pictures. ] Set as wallpaper: You can set a picture as a wallpaper.
PAGE 203
Camera Settings Memory status Menu 6-5 Menu 6-5-1 You can check the capacity of photo and free memory. Clear album Menu 6-5-2 You can delete all pictures which saved in a memory. Auto save Menu 6-5-3 Automatically saves the pictures taken with the camera.
PAGE 204
Settings Menu 7 You can set the following menus for your convenience and preferences. 1. Press [Menu] in standby mode. 2. Press for direct access to enter Settings. Alarm clock Menu 7-1 2. Select the repeat period: Once, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat, Everyday. Date & Time [OK]. You can enter the current date. Set time Menu 7-2-3 Menu 7-2-4 Your can set the time format between 24-hour and 12-hour. Phone settings Menu 7-3 You can set functions relating to the phone. [OK].
PAGE 205
Settings Default Language You can select a picture or an animation of wallpaper by pressing or . You can change the language for the display texts in your phone. This change will also affect the Language Input mode. My folder You can select a picture or an animation as wallpaper. ] Handset scheme: You can choose 4 kind of color schemes, Clean, Clear, Paper and Metalic style. ] Greeting note: If you select On, you can edit the text which is displayed in standby mode.
PAGE 206
Settings ] All data calls: Diverts to a number with a PC connection unconditionally. • View status View the status of the corresponding service. ] All fax calls: Diverts to a number with a fax connection unconditionally. Answer mode ] Cancel all: Cancels all call divert service. ] Flip open: If you select this menu, you can receive an incoming call when only opening flip. The submenus Call divert menus have the submenus shown below. • Activate Activate the corresponding service.
PAGE 207
Settings Security settings Call waiting (network dependent) Menu 7-4-4 ] Activate: If you select Activate, you can accept a waiting (receiving) call. ] Cancel: If you select Cancel, you cannot recognize the waiting (receiving) call. ] View status: Shows the status of Call waiting. Minute minder Menu 7-4-5 If you select On, you can check the call duration by deep sound every minute during a call.
PAGE 208
Settings Phone lock Menu 7-5-2 You can use security code to avoid unauthorized use of the phone. Whenever you switch on the phone, the phone will request security code if you set phone lock to On. If you set phone lock to Automatic, your phone will request security code only when you change your SIM card. Call barring Menu 7-5-3 ] All incoming: The barring service for all incoming calls. ] Incoming when roaming: The barring service for all incoming calls when roaming.
PAGE 209
Settings Fixed dial number (SIM dependent) Menu 7-5-4 You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. The numbers are protected by your PIN2 code. ] Activate: You can restrict your outgoing calls to selected phone numbers. ] Cancel: You can cancel fixed dialling function. ] Number list: You can view the number list saved as Fixed dial number. Change codes Menu 7-5-5 PIN is an abbreviation of Personal Identification Number to prevent use by unauthorized person.
PAGE 210
Settings Preferred Menu 7-6-3 You can set a list of preferred networks and the phone attempts to register with first, before attempting to register to any other networks. This list is set from the phone’s predefined list of known networks. Reset settings Menu 7-7 You can initialize all factory defaults. You need Security code to activate this function. GPRS settings Menu 7-8 You can set GPRS service depending on various situations.
PAGE 211
Service You can access various WAP (Wireless Application Protocol) services such as banking, news, weather reports and flight information. These services are specially designed for mobile phones and they are maintained by WAP service providers. Check the availability of WAP services, pricing and tariffs with your network operator and/or the service provider whose service you wish to use. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services.
PAGE 212
Service Menu 8-1-2 Bookmarks This menu allows you to store the URL of favourite web pages for easy access at a later time. Your phone has several pre-installed bookmarks. These pre-installed bookmarks cannot be deleted. To create a bookmark 1. Press the left soft key [Options]. 2. Select Add new and press the OK key. 3. After entering the desired URL and title, press the OK key. * Tip: Use the “ ” key and key to enter symbols. To enter “.”, press “ ”.
PAGE 213
Service IP address: Enter the IP address of the WAP gateway you want. IP address: Input the IP address of the WAP gateway you access. Dial number: Enter the telephone number to dial to access your WAP gateway. APN: Input the APN of the GPRS. User ID: The users identity for your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway). Password: The password required by your dial-up server (and NOT the WAP gateway) to identify you.
PAGE 214
Service Port: Input the Proxy Port Cache settings - DNS settings Primary server: Input the IP address of the primary DNS server you access Secondary server: Input the IP address of the secondary DNS server you access Menu 8-1-5 The information or services you have accessed are saved in the cache memory of the phone. ] Clear cache: Removes all context saved in cache. ] Check cache: Set a value whether a connection attempt is made through cache or not.
PAGE 215
Service Security certification Menu 8-1-7 A list of the available certification is shown. ] Authority: You can see the list of authority certificates that have been stored in your phone. ] Personal: You can see the list of personal certificates that have been stored in your phone. Reset profiles Menu 8-1-8 You can reset profiles to return to original settings. Browser version The WAP browser version is displayed.
PAGE 216
Downloads Menu 9 Games & more My games & more Menu 9-1 Menu 9-1-1 In this menu, you can manage the Java applications installed in your phone. You can play or delete downloaded applications, or set the connect option. The downloaded applications are organised in folders. Press the left soft key [Select] to open the selected folder or launch the selected midlet. Using the left soft key [Menu], the following menus are available.
PAGE 217
Downloads n Note • The JAR file is a compressed format of the Java program and the JAD file is a description file that includes all detailed information. From the network, prior to download, you can view all detailed file descriptions from the JAD file. • While being based on a standard language (J2ME), not all Java applications are compatible with all handsets on sale insofar as specific libraries may be used for a telephone model.
PAGE 218
Accessories There are various accessories for your mobile phone. You can select these options according to your personal communication requirements. Data cable/CD You can connect your phone to PC to exchange the data between them. Standard Battery n Note • Always use genuine LG accessories. • Failure to do this may invalidate your warranty. Headset • Accessories may be different in different regions; please check with our regional service company or agent for further enquires.
PAGE 219
Technical Data General Product name: F2400 System : GSM 900 / DCS 1800 Ambient Temperatures Max: +55°C Min: -10°C 78
PAGE 220